Home

Craftsman 247.28933 Lawn Mower User Manual

1. CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel Features 172 W Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC H Instrument Cluster 000000 173 BERQUPDES i pstedueq e cagets ke shes ae B Instrument Cluster Description 174 as bi Reda ee 192 M compass And mip Comptes es JEBQIUBDEM du 187 Oil Change Required 193 Control Buttons lesen 188 Trip Functions cese 194 Trip Conditions esee m ems 188 Compass Display csse 195 Compass Temperature Display 189 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features eel rao eae eee acta 198 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX JACK sod s eave d song od bate othe so oe So ahs Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play storesnis adya nanara Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped seio em RR Clock Setting Procedure Bl Sa
2. 5 24 W Occupant Restraints isse eR Ren 37 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 0 38 M Door Locks 0 0 aes Da eE 26 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 39 Manual Door Locks 0005 27 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 43 Power Door Locks 28 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 44 Automatic Door Locks 0 00 29 Energy Management Feature 44 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 30 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Child Protection Door Lock System Rear BeltAlert 2 66 ccc eee iras 45 DOORS eue RES aes Ss s alae ey 31 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 47 a Windows cce dore pora eR EE 32 Seat Belt Extender llle 47 Power Windows 000000005 32 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Wind Buffeting lese 36 Restat Systems ORO sceau eiat ceni A Child Restraint llseeeeens 65 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 H Engine Break In Recommendations 75 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The gg Safety Tipse eeu tees Sh lee Ree ey 76 VERE SRE dubi Meee he 7 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Exhaust GaS 25 928 diim s DES ir meds 76 Velicle suc ES RP EEEE 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enc
3. U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 4 0 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 5 Quarts 5 2 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula 4 0 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 4 0L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 4 0L Engine ZFRBLP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 4 0L Engine 87 Octane Acc
4. OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution there fore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION i 6 o6 nim 9
5. Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability en STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of yo
6. e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 CAUTION Continued NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the tire and loading information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle Continued e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You
7. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 fi
8. Inserting Ignition Key WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger rear passenger doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position RS Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit in Section 4 of this manual Opening either front door will cancel this feature ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result
9. amp e3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 20 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light indicates when the fog lights are On ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 21 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 22 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition VN switch is first turned ON If the light i
10. e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency kHz 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Pate Se 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 mm MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and al
11. you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect syste
12. 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard r SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS A NEVER EXCEED XXX K TIRE m GO SHOULD ORIGINAL TI P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIR INFLATION PRESS RE 200kPa 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 301 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
13. The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible ee TH
14. The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar e Atno time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with re quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FM VSS 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airb
15. in Section 5 Left rear low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 Right front low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 Right rear low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 e Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 e Check gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 e Oil change required with a single chime Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowl
16. 135 Speedometer eu ise aig ies SU care we n 176 DEALING 6s dies doe eagles eed dad gad er oa dep 259 Cold Weather sissies nee er RR 259 Emergency Jump Starting 362 Engine Block Heater 0 262 Engine Fails to Start s manosa e ians 260 Remote aid ue dh Dede a Pe ede hes 25 Steering POWER soreer dcs EEG EU Sa ea SUUS 282 283 Tilt Column cepe tow eee eet Cres 134 Wheel TIIE uide scm dorem eR e d 134 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls eio tre eR RE pr ewe 246 Storage dosana ab ia ea PUERO Ton er BT er 159 Storage Din x exea Res UE A RP 159 Storage Vehicle eee 253 Sun ROOF iso er a cei RR E RES 150 Sun Visor Extension less 86 Sunroof Maintenance 452 INDEX ae Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Synthetic Engine Oil 1 2 2 0 0 0 0 008 375 System Remote Starting 000 25 Tachometer 2 eges e Re PER Dena E 181 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 174 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 69 Tie Down Hooks Cargo scce recce enisies 160 Tilt Steering Column lessen 134 Tip Start iex rere ERA eed wd Pew ewe 259 Tire and Loading Information Placard 301 Tire Identification Number TIN 300 Tire Markings 234 0 09 468 ended deh ek miepes 296 Tire Safety Information 00 296 Tir S 2 3 ker Gee Race a see ga as 77 305 435 Alt Press f
17. Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Control Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED To Activate When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off 40 km h push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right ie ator Wal Farin OF Trier egeret Ronald pe uS Qd 3 A when not in use side of the steering wheel WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator Stbe4c2e and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Electronic Speed Control Lever 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL or
18. All UConnect system sessions begin with a example you can use the combined form voice com press of the PHONE button on the radio control head mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your celluar phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter in
19. Viscosity Engine Oil 0040 374 375 Voice Recognition System VR 115 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description i ces deree ehe dore EUER En s 174 Warning Roll Over 44 3 xb mte es 4 Warnings and Cautions 00 7 Warranty Information 00 432 Washers Windshield less 379 Waxing and Polishing 06 393 Wheel and Wheel Trim 00 394 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 394 Wheel Mounting 0 000000 cee 361 Wind Buffeting nts eges e RR Rem de 36 153 Window Fogging 062224 px 9 Res 252 Windows sesser NOE RAG wel AR eels 32 POWEE sec goes we Sed b een cado gebe s 32 Windshield Defroster 00000005 77 Windshield Washers 0004 132 379 PU ee ate ee A ee as ine Sa ating aod se 379 Windshield Wiper Blades 379 Windshield Wipers 0 0 2 2 000000000 0a ee 132 Wiper Beat x oxdegun oes keene 09 ERRORES 165 Wrecker Towing llle 364 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 394 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made
20. eee 77 Life of DH S 213 a POA ae ba eR EAS 311 Liftgate is sc kae ex s eked ails 36 Lights css eaten VS tes ue vet Ee PES 77 129 Airbag aoc pase 99 9 v9 3 E 63 181 Alarmi seeriaga sdt a ee oe anaes dh cane 77 176 AntFLo6cK serere a e Pea Cee ends 180 BackUp sme 9 vale aba eae ead ae 406 Brake Assist Warning 446 INDEX aaa Brake Warning 2 si m Ree es 177 Low Buel eers raataa me ded 174 175 Bulb Replacement 000000 403 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 186 Cargo sadcseagudet siting thea oM PAS aad 160 Oil Pressure zu caog esee es ERES EET 181 Center Mounted Stop 05 407 PASSING 6 26342 63424 a Pe RR petae 131 CRISE MEN ETC 186 Rear Servicing a aka sania ds seei jee ae 406 Daytime Running i444 40 e Ee es 131 Rear Tail usce eme tee paced ER Ra 406 Dimmer Switch Headlight 130 Seat Belt Reminder 0 175 Electronic Stability Program ESP Security Alarm Theft Alarm 176 Indicator llle 176 292 DervICE iode web acp ue EES EUR AUS s 403 Engine Temperature Warning 175 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 186 POR ua pgs har dede Er de 131 180 405 Side Marker leen 406 Hazard Warning Flasher 354 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 176 Headlight Switch 00000 130 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 182 316 Headlights 2 erbe e eR Ree 403 Traction Con
21. in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK Otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 WARNING When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an e Always apply the parking brake fully when leav uphill grade ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in the PARK position Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the gerous for
22. press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing
23. s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oi
24. secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front
25. so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added L
26. then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second if the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph 16 km h If the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles to a cycle every two seconds Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn off Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multifunction lever and move the wheel up or down as Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident
27. 2 9 In Mexico Contact s osas seecae naea ae aca 430 TACHA one pela weia beet eaebae ahs ds 428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Wi Publication Order Forms 433 Traction Grades ses ee ey oa 435 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades lesus 436 Quality Grades scs cer y ees 435 Treadwear lle 435 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU
28. 376 Engine Oll 45 csv eats pm e RE ue 375 409 Finish Care ee eee 393 en INDEX 443 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 0000 e ee eee 354 TumiSignal 2e szktexe me 176 404 405 406 Flooded Engine Starting 260 Floor Console eee eee 159 Ehud Brake 2ua9eubecek coe Bane a aoe eee 410 Fluid Capacities cu ik oat IER Ede 408 Fluid Leaks sspe RR ESPERE PIS ae 77 Fluid Level Checks llus 391 Automatic Transmission 389 Engine OW usus aere Sheers ins ae ala eee dev 373 Power Steering ss iad42 ek RE EY eR as 283 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 409 Fog Light S rvice vee chee ern weed 405 Fog Lights 4 ies dees eee ee 131 405 Folding Rear Seat 6 6 arteari riai 125 Four Wheel Drive 0 000000 eee 275 Operation oue dcerdie a E E ee UR REQUE S 275 SYSTEMS s ipsu as ugue pog doces oes we 275 Four Wheel Drive Operation 275 Four Way Hazard Flasher 354 Front Axle Differential lessen 391 Fuel eise pe ieee PRU ee od PD REPE 326 Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 0 000 000 sae 331 Gasoline eee sein dew RR ed epe 326 Gauge cides goss D Es egenus p kikans E Eng a dui ares 174 Light s2sk4ereses4ee town Ra rd 175 Materials Added 0 000000 00 329 Octane Rating iua ve awe Baek 326 327 409 Requirements sesoses as aaa RR ROS d 408 Tank Capacity ii sse Erud Pd 408 Fuel Sy
29. A ea HSS iot inii e cut sit 199 Six Way Driver s Power Seat With Manual Elash To Pass uua ame VR es 131 Recliner inest 68234944 8 0994 Gees 122 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 131 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 123 T r Signals vele ba Care Hee nn 131 Head Restraints 00 0000 123 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 131 Heated Seats If Equipped 124 Interior Lights cs ce 132 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat lll Windshield Wipers And Washers 132 Feature iius snb does hdr dee A Rua 125 Windshield Wiper Operation 132 ae TO per And Close the Moole sirit tpit sa Intermittent Wiper System 133 ED PENNE 129 Windshield Washers LLL 133 Multifunction Lever isses 129 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Mist Features cse gra ae oe dap 133 System Operation 00 141 a Tilt Steering Column ccce cx ees 134 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 144 Wi Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 135 Programming HomeLink To Activate uer exu E RA 135 Gate Operator Canadian Programming To Set At A Desired Speed 135 Using HomeLink i ens To Deactivate ces sc Ree Ren 136 Reprogramming A Singl
30. Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted with P235 65R17 and P225 75R16 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P235 65R17 and P225 75R16 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram E 7e cu esc R 055703771 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs
31. Indicators 311 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 328 Life Of Tire cuu Sete te RR 311 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 328 Replacement Tires llle 312 MMT In Gasoline llle 329 ie Chains MM C 314 Materials Added To Fuel 329 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 315 Fuel System Cautions 330 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings 330 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer M Adding Fuel lene 331 ee ae Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap sess 331 Trailer And Tongue Weight 344 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 333 TOWNE BMD nice Reeve w erage nti 945 Ba Vehicle Loading voee e E ERR M eee yess 334 TONNE HIPS duas ay ye ganesh thes a Cer ilication labil err cesses qantas 34 D cba E Bie ees T a Trailer Towing 22er RA eR Reel 336 Towing WD Models ceeecce eder tuts 351 Common Towing Definitions 336 Towing 4WD Or All Wheel Trailer Hitch Classification 341 Drive Models 222m RR 3 ERE 352 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cau
32. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 022606181 Front Airbag Components 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 8192b898 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to
33. Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the
34. M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT HORN Red Controller Occupant Red Hi LOW Classification Module M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN ORC OCM Red HI LOW ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Natural WIPER Blue RR WIPER MOD Power Folding Mirror M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL 8 Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift PWR FOLD MIR Pump DSL LIFT M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U PUMP Export Only Yellow LAMPS M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red PWR MIRR SW Red Controller ORC TT Driver Window Switch EUROPE DRVR WIND SW M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN Red troller NGC Global Red SW Window Module Powertrain Engine WIN MOD Controller GPEC M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK Red troller NGC Trans Red ASST Heater Ventila mission Feed TRANS tion Air Conditionin FEED J1962 Module HVAC MOD EAR Headlamp Wash M29 10 Amp Occupant Classification Red Module OCM HDLP WASH Com pass COMPAS 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Red M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 Yellow BATT M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys
35. Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs 4 0L Engine Replace the timing belt 4 0L Engine Flush and replace the engine coolant O O O C 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 OCOC C O C O C O DO 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cab
36. NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SAFETY TIPS e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon Al li li 1 or fl d monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Pays qua We climate commun pane Lor toor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside the vehicle otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Vehicle Never run the engine in a closed area such as a Seat Belts garage an E parked vehicle wah the Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is cuts frays and loose parts Damaged pa
37. Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min wi
38. ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Da
39. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is completely extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the bac
40. Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect the grille clips to the fender and the headlight ballstuds to the front end module 3 Disconnect electrical connector 4 Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 1 Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from under the vehicle 2 Turn the front fog light bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lights 1 Open the lift gate 2 Remove the two push pins 819e23d7 Push Pins 3 Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical con nection 4 Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the lamp assembly 5 Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 2 Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose if 7 Remove the bulb from the backplate equipped inom the LAMEL Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL eo Replace the CHMSE 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL Screw Locations 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES
41. Rear Cargo Slide Out System Load N Go If Equipped The sliding cargo load floor Load N Go slides back and forth on steel tracks for convenience The maximum load capacity is 400 lbs 181 kg The floor panel can stop every 2 in 50 mm when the handle is released to lock om the panel in position 3 Flip the cover over and lock panel back into position 1 Open the tailgate Load Floor 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Squeeze the right hand release handle 819a9bfc Sliding Panel Release Handle 4 Squeeze the right hand release handle to slide the 3 Pull out the sliding panel panel back into the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the ON position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the ON or OFF position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper
42. Rear Park Assist System operating prop erly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the Rear Park Assist System When you turn off the Rear Park Assist System the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED Furthermore once you turn off the Rear Park Assist System it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and the Rear Park Assist System is turned off a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle and the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED e The Rear Park Assist System when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a Rear Park Assist System malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS TEM and the LED in the Rear Park Assist switch will illuminate If this occurs see your authorized dealer for service CAUTION e The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle in cluding small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Ob stacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 CAUTION Continued WARNING
43. Red tem ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control M38 25 Am Lock Unlock Motors Natura LOCK UNLOCK MTRS CAUTION e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Light rer eher ee TL212 2 Liftgate Lamp i masia eter ene aac bes 567 Overhead Console Lights PLW214 2A Reading Light cospe deies sa draon WL212 2 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlights siu maik noan Re 9008 H13 Front Park Tutti iocos e ys 3157AK Front Sidemarker 0 000000005 168 Back Ups ces ure eti ee Bina mes 3057K Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 Fog Lamp 34 0000 ve e bw H10 9145 License Plate Light 0 00 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal 3057K BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight 1 Open the hood
44. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then op
45. Tongue Weight 344 Wiring iiw mer RR VERRE 348 Trailer Towing Guide 000040 342 Trader Weight i42 e er RR heer ta 342 Transaxle 229 3a de ER EG REDE S 262 Automa Jude ag ux ae eae ins 262 Operation Transfer Case sew caves aa dee ie eee ew ee es 390 Fluid e iu pe Rer ex taan R3 S 410 Maintenance i liQgz cede fX REeUoef3 390 Transmission pra eee eee 265 270 AUtOMAHC sanesna Reread anh ed Oh a4 265 270 Eb ete E A ae ane eee 410 Maintenance lema aa dad asim ees Fen 389 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 23 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 144 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Tread Wear Indicators isses Trip Computer 2 cse mea RR EUR Trip Odometer srete picsa rimana ie pie a aa Trip Odometer Reset Button Turn Signals UConnect Hands Free Phone 454 INDEX ae Uniform Tire Quality Grades 435 Universal Transmitter llle 144 Upholstery Cat i c cerr IRR RR ees ga 395 Vanity Mirrors an s n Roe d e OR Rs m UR RR a 86 Variance Compass sca er e ires 189 197 Vehicle Certification Label 334 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading 0 000000 eee 301 334 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage ee 253 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 205 245
46. a number of reasons A child or others driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse mm could be injured Do not leave the keys in the braking conditions The system operates with a separate ignition A child could operate power windows computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent other controls or move the vehicle wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged surfaces Before divans Calle e dose n leal to brake All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and problems due to excessive heating of the rear type and tires must be properly inflated to produce brakes f accurate signals for the computer The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph to slow down or stop 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal the natural laws of physics from acting on the movement The mo
47. amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system es STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts
48. and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting
49. and the front wheels on the ground If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends flatbed towing with all wheels OFF the ground MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 3 7L 367 H Engine Compartment 4 0L 368 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 369 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 370 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 2 ke ex Ro ERREUR ADS a 370 Bl Replacement Parts 0000 372 W Dealer Service sey chaos isr epa 372 H Maintenance Procedures cen 373 Engine Qil eresie meenen kari emn 373 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 376 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication 0 0 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System cess org eA 380 Cooling System 1 0 6 ee eee 382 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake Systemi ssas salle he rra Ren 388 Left Front Turn Signal 404 Automatic Transmission sss 389 Right Front Turn Signal 405 Transfer Case 24 6 5 5 4 ERU pitung 390 Front Side M
50. angle Seat belt status ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehic
51. another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck Latch Plate To Buckle injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your ab
52. asikara e fas ga Ta iea 372 432 Maintenance Free Battery 04 377 Multi Function Control Lever 129 Maintenance Procedures 0 000 373 Maintenance Schedule 0 0000 412 New Vehicle Break In Period 75 Maintenance Sunroof 0 00000 ee 153 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 186 370 Occupant Restraints 0 00000000 37 10 448 INDEX MM Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 326 327 Odometer ll PP TC 186 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 278 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 278 Oil Engine zie crash pee eR Bea ed Mae 373 409 Capacity 44 race d e dp RAM e drea 408 Dipstick 4 3 13d x tremid ER em es 373 Liter 3uuud cde dederis eire EE 375 409 Identification Logo llle 374 Materials Added to 0 000000 375 Recommendation 374 408 SYNMNCHC ioc med ng e x9 d pee MESE d 375 VISCOSITY ses cete Rm ees re emen 374 375 408 Onboard Diagnostic System 369 370 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 144 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 84 Overdrive 0 0 00 cee eee 181 267 273 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 267 273 Overheating Engine 205 174 355 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 433 Paint Cate iuste hacen Ox E e SOR HOA CRURA d 392 Paint Damage sc sre xe ob eae es 39
53. assistance of service and engineering specialists to ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not in
54. been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and s
55. bottom edge of the oil fill hole Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft lbs 20 34 N m 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes a
56. change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn
57. changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 CAUTION Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the The winch mechanism is designed for use with the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Lowering Raising Spare Tire 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 4 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position 5 Turn o
58. combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 en STARTING AND OPERATING 303 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your and number and size of occupants This table is for trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for manual to determine how this reduces the available the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle cargo and Muggas Toad capacity of your venice e For the following example the combined weight of NOTE occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 392 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WAR
59. could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Towing Requirements Tires proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits spare tire ee Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper
60. described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child
61. dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call pager UConnect Tutorial pair a phone try again phone pairing pairing voice training phonebook phone book work previous yes record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc
62. driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive yo
63. e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the e Drivers must be careful when backing up even Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors when using the Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots be fore backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Enabling and Disabling the System There are times when you may want to disable the Rear Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is Park Assist System such as when towing a trailer strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off vehicles or obstacles be
64. is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and
65. lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can
66. make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the ra
67. manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts the front airbags provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the O
68. may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the calibration mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from
69. medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information m 057005576 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 057005577 057005578 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment o
70. message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 Assoon as you turn your key to the
71. near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio Voice Recognition VR anode e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead five seconds until the session begins or console if equipped and the mirror e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the e Always wait for the beep before speaking Fem Serip Voice Trouin GA e Speak normally without pausing just as you would Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the speak to a pe
72. normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is on speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 6 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is on push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control lever ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU
73. on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped ED The front fog light switch is in the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or Low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on Low beam Selecting High beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft 1 m They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be tu
74. operation ESP Off Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by briefly depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP BAS ESP or the BAS system If this lamp remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking s
75. or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or Closing Sunroof Express any object to project through the sunroof opening Press the switch forward and release it within one half Injury may result second and the sunroof will close automatically from any Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof NOTE To ensure the sunroof is fully closed press and hold the switch until the sunroof has completely stopped moving Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature
76. panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Front Power Outlet WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adapter e Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Close the lid when not in use and while driving vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the the vehicle battery even more quickly Only use these inter e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an mittently and with greater caution electric shock and failure After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Continued Power outlets are designe
77. reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits
78. restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are de signed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label
79. result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the indicators appear in replaced two or more adjacent grooves the tire should be re placed Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death
80. safety of others en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway striking objects and or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various dri
81. same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4L or 4LO Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L or 4LO for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L or 4LO range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water t
82. such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Refer to Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires
83. system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or
84. system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer Continued video players on the right front passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occu pant Classification System to be unable to cor rectly classify the right front occupant This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned ON e Remains on after the six to eight second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving E
85. temperature es iss Feet SIE MN UD ue ihe Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC mode displayed will change between Trip Displays du med 2 FRHIEped yon When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic 5 Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept messages p a selection Also the FUNCTION SELECT but ton changes the current CD track being played if so equipped when the EVIC is in the e Left front turn signal light out with a single chime Compass Temp Audio screen e Turn signal on with a continuous warning chime e Left ear turn signal light out with a single chime Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip W Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus e Right rear turn signal light out with a single chime tomer Programmable Features Right front turn signal light out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal settings not available vehicle not in PARK ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Left right front door ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left right rear door ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate ajar with a single chime Left front low pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
86. the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e For certain operations compound commands can be Help Command used For example instead of saying Setup and then If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to Phone Pairing the following compound command know your options at any prompt say Help following can be said Setup Phone Pairing the beep The UConnect system will play all the options e For each feature explanation in this section only the Ai any prompt yot aak tor nel combined form of the voice command is given You To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press can also break the commands into parts and say each the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for part of the command when you are asked for it For directions
87. the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions and rollover events When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover
88. the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi mately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until the Compass Vari ance message and the last variance zone number dis plays in the EVIC 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais As you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automa
89. the use of the recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation mode will not operate in FLOOR MIX or DEFROST modes Air Conditioning Operation Press the temperature control knob to activate the air conditioning mode A lamp will illuminate when the air conditioning system is engaged Press the knob again to deactivate the system NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the Snow flake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the DEFROST mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminants cigarette smoke pe
90. tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety CAUTION of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the The TPMS has been optimized for the original TPMS from functioning properly Always check the equipment tires and wheels TPM
91. touch each other Continued 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information Continued WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C
92. trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL button should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL button 3 7L engine or 4 range 4 0L engine while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals Towing Tips TOW HAUL If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency en STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Towing Tips Cooling System RECREATI
93. which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col removed lision Have the airbags and seat belt retractor as nlocks th ically 2 sembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as EON Re is Coote O possible Also have the Occupant Classification Sys Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING tem serviced as well Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment i anaes Mi f Pl dn ibn 35 X 2 with the vehicle stopped the vehicle communication phia io doda ari dpa dao NS oap network intact and the power intact the Enhanced be injured if the airbag system is not there to Accident Response System performs the following func protect yon p not molly the components or tions wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the e Cuts off fuel to the engine upper right side of the instrument panel Do not e Flashes hazard lights ed the front bumper or vehicle body struc Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad e Do not place or hang any items such as add on vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag
94. will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information S0bfeofo Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal
95. will resume function at whichever position the switch is set 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft Rear Window Defroster If Equipped st The pushbutton for the rear window defroster is located on the mode knob of the climate control switch bank Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors optional An amber light shows that the defroster is on The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi mately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements ROOF DITCH APPLIQUE NON FUNCTIONAL The Roof Ditch Applique as provided on the vehicle is non functional Metal side rails and crossbars can be purchased from Mopar accessories to proved a func tional roof rack system The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
96. will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into OVERDRIVE when cold This is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the This electronically shifted transfer case provides two first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 2WD mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due tothe and 4 wheel drive high range 4WD LOCK fluid partially draining from the torque converter into B the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case Operating InformationlPrecautions This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is Transfer Case Switch located on the center console The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When additional traction is required the tran
97. will prompt you to say the number you ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook want to call or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook For example you can say 234 567 8901 e The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are f
98. 10 Battery ER 377 Chafeing o eese hee Gh ate ded are 362 Emergency Starting sss eae 362 Gas Caution S actin ioo dooce esas done Late ah gees 362 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 Belts Seat 2 0 ee ee 38 Body Mechanism Lubrication 379 B Pillar Location 1 0 ee eee ee eee 301 Brake Assist System 0 0 00 eee 290 Brake Control System Electronic 288 Brake Fluid 285 brem seeder gesedes 410 Brake l ating 4 unos a pa ete eee eee eds 284 Brake System llle eese 388 Anti Lock ABS llle 285 288 Master Cylinder ci eevee reg memes 388 Parking oggi EP det Ga ae 284 Warning Light 000 0 177 Brake Transmission Interlock 263 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Bulb Replacement 2 29 er 8544 3 403 bulbs Eight 2g ck ata amp pee aA Sey g Sree el ead 403 Calibration Compass 0004 190 196 Capacities BIW i eiie e Eten china awe es 408 Caps Filler Fuel 245 5 648 02 tra a ee ee Rud dos 331 Power Steering 6 ee 283 Car Washes i xe cake aaa EE REA RUP XA 393 Carbon Monoxide Warning 76 330 Cargo Area Features 0 000000 eee 160 Cargo Compartment 0 00000 0000 160 Light ose aesa nig ee e RUE Eb s 160 Cargo Light saries p ann i ESE REESE ERS 160 10 440 INDEX MM Cargo Load Floor sas goa dace iie a a eba eee 162 Cargo Slide Out
99. 2 Panic Alarm 22s ee ber enti eterni 23 Park Sense System Rear s setce aes 137 Parking Brake a cess c x eR Rede 284 Parking On Hill 5 cde RED eR hs 284 Passing Light e iu sued che e re 131 Personal Settings s etase vedi b RR 198 Doc pM 75 Pets Transporting lle 75 Phone Cellular esee 86 Phone Hands Free UConnect 86 Placard Tire and Loading Information 301 Polishing and Waxing 0 05 393 en INDEX 449 Power Door Locks i eee yan ee ees 28 INVerter ss atate dhe eee o Rex oe 9e ess 156 MIROS 4d OSes bed RP b edes 85 DUCCHING Em 282 283 SUDTOO idet Ev Re aid e eias 150 Wind OWS fre x Goria bdo e dnas e eR eda p Rec 32 Power Steering Fluid isis rm 410 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 47 Preparation for Jacking iilis 358 Programmable Electronic Features 198 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 23 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 cee eee eee 308 Radio Satellite 0 0 0 00 eee eee 240 Rear Axle Differential 0 391 Rear Park Sense System 00006 137 Rear Window Defroster 0000 166 Rear Window Features 0040 165 Rear Wiper Washer 000000000 eeu 165 Rearview Mirrors 1 0 06 eee eee 83 Reclining Front Seats 121 Recreational Towing 0000000 351 Reformulated Gasoline 04 327
100. 2 Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine com partment to access the headlight bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlight unit housing 4 Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlight housing counterclockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Left Front Turn Signal 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right full right lock 2 Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting counter clockwise Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole Access Door 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Right Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlight unit in the engine com partment to access the turn signal bulb 3 Twist the bulb counterclockwise to remove 4 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Front Side Marker 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the grille assembly as follows a Remove eight fasteners b Remove two screws from each headlight c Remove two rivets from the center of the grille d Remove one push pin from the top of each fender e
101. 395 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front o
102. 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Oud Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 419 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LJ Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Orde
103. 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg mm w Cooler 4 0L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg w Cooler 4 0L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and and loading information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle
104. 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer WARNING to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle s reed ex enr UR AIR d ad RE ES 429 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 431 Prepare For The Appointment 429 Service Contract ess 431 Prepare A Elst 5 aet rn eoe doe 429 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 432 Be Reasonable With Requests 429 MEMOPAR Parts 000000000 432 H If You Need Assistance lesse 429 W Reporting Safety Defects 432 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 430 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 430 M E
105. D DVD Maintenance ll Climate Controls Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System seed e um eia OG Ae hie Operating Tips 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Storage Tray 4 Center Air Outlet 5 Radio CONES 6 Glove Compartment 7 Climate Control 8 Heated Seat Switch 9 Rear Park Assist Switch 10 Passenger Airbag Disable Light 81c8724e 11 Hazard Warning Flasher 12 Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Switch 13 Cigar Lighter Power Outlet 14 Storage Bin f Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 14 F FM 101 1 10 819788a4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel cap is located 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is
106. D II This system monitors e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause the performance of the emissions engine and automatic further damage to the emission control system It transmission control systems When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and drivability The operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent vehicle must be serviced before any emissions performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis tests can be performed sions well within current government regulations If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the
107. E REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA 042005200 REO Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search
108. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash once and the horn will sound a single chirp Sound Horn with Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed i e func tional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to de
109. EHICLE 167 5 i NOTE Metal rails crossbars are offered by Mopar CAUTION Continued accessories See your authorized dealer e Place a blanket or other protection between the External racks do not increase the total load carrying surface of the roof and the load capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity CAUTION e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the sible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
110. Equipped This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the light goes off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brak
111. INGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle 2 Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
112. NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized deal ers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Cust
113. NG SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Ex
114. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five
115. NING Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause Tire Pressure damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Un
116. NT PANEL M Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition Dolby System VR If Equipped Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Section 3 Dolby Laboratories For UConnect Voice R
117. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued WARNING Continued e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop es STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NEUTRAL Move the shift lever into this gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Always depress and main tain firm pressure on the brake pedal while in this range Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range for extended periods of time The engine may be started in this range NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow ing in Section 5 and Towi
118. ONAL TOWING BEHIND To reduce potential for engine and transmission over MOTORHOME ETC heating take the following actions Towing 2WD Models City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put the trans Recreational towing all four sherlar tie mc eee round se Ot NUTR E LE DE towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is Highway Driving removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground Reduce speed while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe Ain Condon transmission damage mm Turn off temporarily NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information ground 352 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing 4WD or All Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Recreational towing all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing is NOT allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 354 Prepara
119. Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects ma SR Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
120. R VEHICLE 137 Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slip pery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains om speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle and provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the
121. RUMENT PANEL 245 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Press the release button and lower the screen Overhead Display Screen 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 8161d54e VES Remote Control Location REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch mo
122. Rear Window Features 165 H Electrical Power Outlet 0 0 154 ary a heed NE 165 H Power Inverter If Equipped 156 Rear Wisdow Debost r M Bahlpped 1s 166 E Cupholders S 158 Roof Ditch Appliqa Now Tuni ai eei 166 ho orco eT RP T 159 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate indicate when the dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror 817892c4 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to
123. Refrigerant sick ag ted alk Vr RU ene 378 Release Hood 0 cee eee 127 Reminder Lights On css cassas aaa aeiia a s 130 Reminder Seat Belt llle 45 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 246 Remote Starting System llle 25 Replacement Keys ditate maypa ee eens 15 Replacement Parts 372 Replacement Tires 1 0 2 0 000000 eee 312 Reporting Safety Defects 004 432 Restraint Head 55 isse Races 123 Restraints Child 450 INDEX eae Restraints Occupant 000000 37 Roll Over Warning 6 eee eee 4 Roof Type Carrier 0 2 ee eee 166 Rotation Tires euge robo pe be a tad PS 315 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 76 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 77 Safety Defects Reporting 432 Safety Information Tire 296 Safety TIPS acc se x ance e CR Ped ES opa 76 Satellite Radio 2 0 ee eee 240 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 241 Schedule Maintenance lesen 412 Seat Belt Maintenance 0000 eae 76 Seat Belt Reminder lle 45 Seat Belts zs gs ERR GP ERES 38 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 43 And Pregnant Women llle 47 Child Restraint llle een 65 73 Extender 22602 DURS URP SE 47 Front Seat 4e dep REG REGN ee he eo 38 Inspection serens ngriheni ui pa
124. S pressures and TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more warning have been established for the tire size tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tion or sensor damage may result when using re to continue to function properly placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 26 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The TRIP ODOMETER shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button To reset the TRIP ODOMETER press and hold the button while in trip mode until the TRIP ODOMETER resets When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display MOOK cuo sud gc ue E bau yaa Door Ajar BATE uade dace depu a s Liftgate Ajar LoWASH Low Washer Fluid ESPORBE d RR PCS ES ESP Deactivated BASCAP apoyan p a whee xe Fuel Cap Fault NOFUSE oc aa a a a RERO Fuse Fault LoW DrB m ER eh dinn Low Tire Pressure NOTE Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Compass Mini Trip Computer Electroni
125. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anything placed on the back seat because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illumi nated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator U
126. Se procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Ke
127. System Load NGO ene eee e 163 Cargo Tie DOWNS sss bas rua orb dors 160 Cargo Vehicle Loading llle 334 Cellular Phone scr ree aie OS we 86 Center High Mounted Stop Light 407 Certification Label 522a ros 334 Changing A Flat Tite qese esse nst Rene 356 Charging ccs ae ie Goede i ense 362 Chart Dire SIZIng ce sed a ai bene RETE RR et 298 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 0000 186 370 Checks Safety cae viene reme ees ba eats 76 77 Child Restraint isis aiaro gii aiii yi 65 66 71 73 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 69 71 Child Safety Locks 1 0 oe eee eee 31 Climate Controle xx euet Aer gehe oo 248 Wc UP 202 216 220 229 Com Hold t occi vee cae EX e RE 159 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 247 CompactSpare Tire 2c ssec p Reda 308 COMPASS 2 ooops das eteren p e es 187 190 195 Compass Calibration isses 190 196 Compass Variance sees 189 197 Computer Trip Travel sas iraa t ie 194 Console esae ed bye banded re d e 159 Console Floor llle 159 Contract Service ii tebii eaid E 431 Cooling System sss peg he Rex e ne ed 382 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 384 Coolant Capacity llle sls 408 Coolant Level yenas tuama a ia eee 386 Disposal of Used Coolant 386 Drain Flush and Refill 0 383 InSpecton x23 bsec eae e Pe eG ga es 383 Points to Rem
128. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Six Way Driver s Power Seat with Manual Recliner The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat Power Seat Switches This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to the rear of the power seat switch Pull up on the lever to recline the seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Head Restraints The front passenger seat can be folded flat to allow for Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in extended cargo space Pull up on the lever to fold down the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head the seat back restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The head restraints may be raised without pushing in the button Fold Flat Passenger Seat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for each heater are located near the botto
129. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough
130. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To cl
131. UN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on
132. WPR HEATED SEAT PORK QUIE AIR OUTLET HGH C DEFROST AND 10WFR AR OUTI FT D amp VENTILATING FAN SLIDING DOOR TRUM DECK AIRCONDIONNG CHILD SEAT ANCHOR L L f SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY amp oe EOR RELEASE HANDLE HILDREN LATCH DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIENE TOP DOWN Tor ur o MASANE We voce RECOGNITION BUTTON IY VCONNECI BUTTON m SEE OWNERS MANUAL 180 FLECINONIC SIAR IY ELECTRONIC BRAKE SPEED CONTROL ar ES 2 D AWD O ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORE RRAKF TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 010505550 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind i shield This number also appears on the Automobile Vehicle Identification Number Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN your vehicle the vehicle regi
133. WR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allow ance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and
134. Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode WEL CD PERVER MPS AU AMACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio aura osc im Push the On Vol trol knob d time to t me J come mere Powe Pome ome Qn Por ide olume control knob a second time to turn mm GI Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be 042305232 set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the
135. a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
136. a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will illu T4 minate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will auto matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS senso
137. a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the
138. acement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 7 Separating Case Halves 81182c72 3 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 5 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten until snug General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two c
139. activate the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the parking lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Flash Lights with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Express Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front
140. ag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e Turns on the interior lamps
141. again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E F FM 101 1 10 041005944 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e Navigation system screens if equipped e Audio mode display 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight The system allows the driver to select information by Press and release the COMPASS wheel D compass readings and the outside
142. ake sure to say Send Far End Audio Performance e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is e Audio quality is maximized under not in motion is recommended A e low to medium blower setting e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook low to medium vehicle speed e Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name OW TORS UIDI recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar smooth road surface fully closed windows es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e dry weather conditions and Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness tion can generally be re established by switching the to a large degree rely on the phone and network and phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to not the UConnect system remain in Bluetooth ON mode e operation from the driver s seat e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by Power Up lowering the in vehicle audio volume After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you I tible vehicl m performance ma Ta Sonveruie Fenole system pelioniancednay De must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system compromised with the convertible top down 110 UNDERSTANDI
143. al may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 27 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of LS an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle w
144. all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE e The 4 wheel drive system will not allow shifts be tween 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the AWD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift e Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experi enced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the
145. alytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Engine Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face
146. an 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will con tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a signifi cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction e the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass
147. and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing E 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Rotate tires 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends 0 O and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 54 000 Mile
148. anol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher
149. ar Seat If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood there are two latches that must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Push the safety latch lever to the right It is located To prevent possible damage between the grille and hood opening left of the center oer cana ihe ead dovlosedit e Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING simidase If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latc
150. arker sss err s 405 Front Rear Axle Fluid 391 Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 405 Appearance Care And Protection From Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup COPTOSIOD 4 e dora p se he d PET ea 392 Lights 4 Rs deep ree ego eed 406 la Euses con censere 396 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 407 Totally Integrated Power Module 396 W Floid Capacities sreca pose sponsras ira ti 408 Bi Replacement Light Bulbs 403 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 409 B bulb Replacement usse hen 403 oo PPP 409 Headlight ss 2er anpra eer un de ei 403 GE fos Re TOT 410 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 071005583 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L 071205585 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Engine Oil Fill 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OB
151. as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 PTET ee 12 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 dnce d an 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps WMA 441 and 4g 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of f
152. aust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle 81937590 Fuel Filler Cap 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could re
153. ave successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened ees THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts WARNING throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can the best way to keep the baby safe increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 48 THINGS TO
154. bum title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scroll control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button re
155. c Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instru ment cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped in this section for more infor mation If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interv
156. cage EE 76 Maintenance leer 76 396 Shoulder Belt Anchorage iss 43 MCAS eiea ae at d de ra e P nere Eo e rad 120 Adjustment uk vx pupa eS dre de gers 120 Cleaning esse ieah ckg e p rd do e e msgs 394 Head Restraints 00 0 0 123 Heated 4 ic ssk4 e ERA rS RR 124 Rear Folding 4 ced des re Ra 125 Reclining 4 e PB RR REG 121 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 409 Selection of Oll seeren ee ee eee 374 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 Sentry Key Programming sess 16 Sentry Key Replacement 0 15 Service Assistance 00 eee ee eee ee 429 en INDEX 451 Service Contract sese cial es Ae HR eae wale See 431 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator isses 186 Service Manuals 0000s eee 433 Setting the Clock es eR 202 216 220 229 Settings Personal wei eile m ae Re 198 Shift Lock Manual Override 264 Shifting Automatic Transmission 265 270 Shoulder Belts 55 cR REID RS 38 Signals Tum sess 131 176 404 405 406 Sliding Cargo Floor LoadN Go sese iep in 163 Snow Chains Tire Chains 314 Spare Tire es es aes e eas een 308 309 356 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 cee ee eee 326 Oll iss aia fa acd eo Ru URS UR RE Re a 3 374 Speed Control Cruise Control
157. cator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step fo
158. cause the hitch ball willbe through the EVIC For details refer to Personal Settings much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia Customer Programmable Features under Electronic when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and manual hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Vehicles Equipped with Rear Park Assist Switch System Operation You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off by The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper pressing the Rear Park Assist switch located the lower fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from switch bank below the climate controls the rear bumper fascia The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Rear Park Assist Switch 032805242 Rear Park Assist LED Display 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window When
159. ccupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child size category This could be a child teenager or even a adult The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side and rollover colli sions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the fr
160. center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel Power Mirror Switch Press the switch to the L left or R right to select a mirror Using one of the four arrows move the mirror to the desired position 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide Out Feature The sun visor slide on rod feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sa
161. ces in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Arm the System Remove the keys from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Close all the doors The Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second pre arm period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the system arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set Manually locking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not arm the system To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door
162. clude acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 438 INDEX MM About Your Brakes illis 284 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 285 Adding Fuel i222 lex pean RR 331 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 376 Air Conditioner Maintenance 378 Air Conditioning 29s e e dens 248 251 Air Conditioning Controls llus 251 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 252 Air C
163. d GATE as an indica tion of when the liftgate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the liftgate is not com pletely closed the VF display will show the word GATE On EVIC equipped vehicles GATE AJAR will be displayed If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will sound if the rear liftgate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 8192b8ae Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right fron
164. d Release 1 1 ee ee 127 iun cc oy og who Rely aad Rea a ey add a 12 KEY sce trad pense Gea doen 4 a nee de Seay 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illuminated Entry 0 0 00 cee eee 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 0 14 en INDEX 445 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 65 66 Inflation Pressure Tires 00000000 eee 306 Information Center Vehicle 191 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 83 Instrument Cluster less 173 174 Instrument Panel and Controls 172 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 396 Integrated Power Module Fuses 396 Interior Appearance Care 005 395 Interior Lights os recce Ex py baw eR tee 132 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 133 Intfoduich On a 3 2 wane da ee pA Rr ee OPA he es 4 Inverter Power 0 0 0 0 ee 156 Jack Location sere 2 0 0 00 00 eee eee 356 Jack Operati n eere 356 358 Jacking Instructions 358 Key Programming lees 16 Key Replacement 0 0000 eee eee 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 14 Key In Reminder lllssllleeess 13 Keyless Entry System llle 19 Keys uud cp he dx rer E QR RR Rad o ae Rs 12 Lap Shoulder Belts sasas adins fra aaea e 38 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren xe ERR ERES 69 71 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000 ce eee 326 Leaks Fluid
165. d for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 110 Volt 150 Watt power inverter outlet lo cated on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can be used to power small appliances and electronics 110 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power outlet Press the switch located in the center stack lower switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch again to turn the power off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE When the inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power Power Inverter Switch NOTE Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a Three Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the In the center console there are two cupholders for the cen
166. d representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and
167. d the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
168. d turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD
169. damage e When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion or locking out overdrive whenever possible e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes an Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve
170. ded transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Adding Fluid Lubricant should be at
171. derinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated en STARTING AND OPERATING 307 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at leas
172. des to Radio or CD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cl
173. dio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
174. directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the nega
175. dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent antifreeze not radiator antifreeze Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasol
176. domen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its will withdraw any slack in the belt stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have
177. door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Using the Panic Alarm NOTE The PANIC and SECURITY alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the PANIC and SECURITY modes to hear the differences in the horn If one should sound in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the PANIC alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC alarm is on the headlights and parking lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on The PANIC alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater During the PANIC mode the door locks and RKE systems will function normally PANIC mode will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm system on vehicles so equipped Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming in this section NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended repl
178. e en eee m RR ERR 306 Chains 299a eR 6 e RE eas 314 Changing 4 4 tertile M p ERU AUREUS 356 Compact Spates sexa me ea ees 308 General Information 0040 305 High Speed cresco seers n enn 308 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 0 eee eee 306 Jacking 4 26344 bee Por PES es 356 Ee of TITS euis dcus eared aan Ree ae 311 Load Capacity eene ee n aes aoe eS 301 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 316 Pressure Warning Light 182 Quality Grading sess smese ansians E Eak i 435 Radial secete nebim eb ew ERR 308 Replacement x4 cedar oe divers d 312 Rotation oi e egke ore ERO ERE RP 315 Salei sua ae Atel po Fis Suite Ys ad fosa 77 296 p M BR CAA OE See RSS ELE ees 298 Spare EE 356 SPINNING ss ood c0egoeded toms PUE RR 310 Tread Wear Indicators 000 311 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 344 Torque Converter Clutch 0 270 274 en INDEX 453 TOWING pr EESTI 336 24 Hour Towing Assistance l l 101 Disabled Vehicle 0 000000 364 G de rarei Sete eck ao uc pact Rode Rd ch E 342 Recreational lees 351 Weights aces aie etnies erue Eee eiae 342 Towing ASSIStANCE usados m aei RR edet 101 Traction Control ee rerea cetreria tina 179 289 Traer TOWING sessen Sb A eee E eee 336 Cooling System Tips 2005 351 Eiteli s uie x aes aca doe BR Nae Eek e 341 Minimum Requirements 345 Trailer and
179. e lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type ao No program type or un dii None Adult Hits Adilt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Program Type di d Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type 16 em Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the hours and then press an
180. e Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE GC
181. e station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to as
182. e HomeLink To Resume Speed o n onoono naonnu 136 Button cius ee vet er xe aes Tad 149 To Vary The Speed Setting sss 136 DOCULILY cad DD 149 Manual Transmission 137 PEEPS a side bar gavne tae qu 19 To Accelerate For Passing sese 137 General Information 150 H Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 137 BUFOWSESURIOGE USED EQUIP Peden Gti 199 System Usage Precautions 138 MPELUBE Soot EXDICES enews Sasa pe Eo Enabling And Disabling The System 140 Opening SBREOOLE Mantel Meade assests BE 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Closing Sunroof Express 151 Front Storage Compartment 159 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 152 Console Storage Compartment 159 Finch Protect Features 22s so eti ua 152 W Cargo Area Features oos etre a 160 Pinch Protect Override 152 Cargo Light isse vale eR E Da nai 160 Venting Sunroof Express 152 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 160 Sunshade Operation s esros cesi lilius 153 Cargo Load Floor If Equipped 162 Wind Buffeting 2 0006 ota ete eR 153 Rear Cargo Slide Out System Load N Go Sunroof Maintenance 05 153 AEP Pl seu Finde eas beep sean ss 163 Ignition Off Operation ETEA 153 Bl
183. e Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position applied It does not show the degree of brake applicatio
184. e country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the mm setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are
185. e is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as IPODs Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings x NV10 N z 89 040506040 To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the CMTC reset button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approxi mately 10 seconds until the current variance zone num ber is displayed 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold
186. e is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the UC
187. e set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the t
188. eaners or antistatic sprays 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged ie scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81c2cd2b The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be fully closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where you desire ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the sys tem in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you turn the outer control ring to the right from the OFF position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start
189. ear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine WARNING warms up Remember to disconnect the cord before driving WARNING Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could WARNING cause electrocution Do not leave children or animals inside parked Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits CAUTION quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to e The engine block heater cord is found under the
190. eat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row seat belts with the automatic locking retractors pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow it to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use
191. ecognition System VR referto Macrovision Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in cunno unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If engineering or disassembly is prohibited a aed llite Radio in this section D E iens PE DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The Operating Instructions Video Entertainment ater Systems Inc System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or
192. ecommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check 42RLE 3 7L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Fluid Level Check W5A580 4 0L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommen
193. ect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicl
194. ected through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side x window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature Hot settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press the mode control knob to activate the c recirculation mode A lamp in the knob will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Press the knob again to deactivate the system Only use the recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather
195. effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Aud
196. egrated Power Module TIPM J Creen P T e Saky Cavity Cartridge Mini Description J9 40 Amp PZEV Motor Flex Fuel Fuse Fuse Green J10 30 Amp Hdlp Wash Relay j CUR Foyer Heung ees Pink Manual Tuning Valve J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pwr Pink Liftgate Module 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Pink THATCHAM Lock Yellow Unlock Power olding J22 25 Am Sunroof Module Door Module Natura J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw M1 15 Am C p enter High Mounted Yellow IOD Main Blue Stop Light CHMSL J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window Brake Switch T Defogger M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Yellow Pink M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Lockers JA7 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Yellow Green M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Red Yellow Module PCM Trans M5 25 Amp Inverter Range Natural jig a Radiator Fan M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain Yellow Yellow Sensor J20 30 Amp Pront Wiper LO EI M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Fink Yellow BATI ACC SELECT es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat M13 20 Amp Ignition Off D
197. ehicle has come to a complete stop 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3rd gear the transmission will never shift above 3rd gear but can shift down to 2nd gear or 1st gear when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s Al 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 lowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shi
198. ember 0 387 Pressure Cap 4 s epa obe dep os eS 385 NENNEN INDEX 441 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 383 408 409 Corrosion Protection 0 0000 cee eee 392 Cupholdets 4er nec eo uno ee eee Sd 158 Customer Assistance l l 429 Daytime Running Lights 131 Dealer Service llle 372 Defroster Rear Window 166 Defroster Windshield 77 250 Delay Intermittent Wipers 133 Diagnostic System Onboard 369 Dimmer Switch Headlight 130 Dipsticks Oil Engine cue cd RR Re ad eeu a 373 Power Steering aeg ache nra ree 283 Disposal Engine Oll sue se 4 RESTER 375 Used Coolant Antifreeze 0 386 Door Locks cre siae ce be eb we tk eee es 26 Door Opener Garages sesde dasci s a aha 144 Driving x3 ds we Exe dox ani oer oa ded 277 Ott Pavement y lisse Ru RPVREXCRERTG 278 Off Road E dE exa 278 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 245 Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Informat
199. en the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This vehicle has two 12 Volt auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapt ers The front power outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument
200. enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate JE Le MESEEK SEEK AN c IN 042305233 RES RSC Radio 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to tur
201. enter of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indi cator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For occupants classified in the child size category the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off Move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Indicator Light Location 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint
202. eps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation Normal op eration will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range
203. eptable 89 Octane Preferred 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 412 Required Maintenance Intervals WM Maintenance Schedule 412 COMmreoemMm zon mMoZzr2zma2Zz rz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
204. er than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after the manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTI
205. es for the required maintenance intervals master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Inspect the brake hoses and lines ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 415 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule C
206. essed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Manual Lock Plunger WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks A door lock switch is located on each of the front door panels Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and either of the front doors is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate Achime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder
207. ey say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages fully Manual Seat Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Seatback Release Lever 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
208. f Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect en STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional trailer tow prep package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain AII trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Gro
209. f the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J3 40 Amp Rear Door Module RR Green DOOR NODE J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Natural J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Natural J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Green tem ABS Pump ESP J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Pink tem ABS Valve ESP 8 40 A P M t If Totally Int
210. ft lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 5th gear OVERDRIVE The trans mission will automatically shift from 4th gear to OVER DRIVE if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the note under torque converter clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from 2nd gear to Ist gear after the initial 1st to 2nd gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detec
211. g keep the front of the condenser clean also 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install only the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mile age and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s r
212. g noe uim iis Ro cR Use 9 8 9 SUPCR CR UR ELAD e 6 8 C8 S own 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ecccecccceccceccceccce 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 cece cece ccc eccceccreccccecs 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc cece reece ewer ewer hh 9 mnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cree cree cece cence eee ee hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4435939459999 9599 4e v TSS vy STE CHET OTE OS 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc cccccccc reer eee s tn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece cece cere cece cee hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 huma HER EO RE RES RR QU E Gnd E Q4 8 01 BNE ACA AUR RU P o d Roe ius teas INTRODUCTION CONTENTS MiIntroduction osser ce eee 4 Warnings And Cautions 0 7 H Rollover Warning oaaao Rr 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manuadl Ls 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual
213. g nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it in the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 801354b4 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 80135497 Front Jacking Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening f
214. ged e sia ds Brake Assist System BAS 290 Deve TORE ME di Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 291 FROID UTILIS pean edd Electronic Stability Program ESP 292 Hill Climbing 0 2 0 0 esses 280 ESP BAS Warning Lamp o m Tesco Day nh acidi teta p igi ael H Tire Safety Information 296 Afer Dering ORDA qr tiese dpa tain a0 Tire Markings m e ee RR 296 B Power Stecting sess irent Rx 282 fine Identification Number IN css enis 300 ud SE CHC Sasa sent ae Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 301 la Parking Brake 24x kx Rr ERAS 284 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Wi Tires General Information 305 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 316 Tire Pressures v ounce ade eR Y 305 Bas SYStEM casei s eere RE d i 319 Tire Inflation Pressures s tese se miian 306 Premium System If Equipped 321 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 308 General Information 326 Radial Ply Tires esesten RE REY 308 W Fuel Requirements cccssserec kr ren Rn 326 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 308 D L ENGIN ics seu ea p RR RES 326 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 309 LOL Engines eru ese 9 ye eee ia 327 B Tire Spinning 2 6 6 6 eee eee eee 310 Reformulated Gasoline 327 Tread Wear
215. h beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors 0 0 00 0000 eee Power MirfOfS s 35 3343 oer PSS Shoe os x Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped ll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Operation 84 84 85 86 Phone Call Features UConnect System Features Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System llle General Information 0 ll Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Voice Recognition System VR Operation Commands 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Trainin eo er de RO E OR etn 120 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And lA C ee eee E eee ease ee eee 120 Epa lt 0 py aa naan ee eta a Front Manual Seat Adjustment 120 Figli RERNE se ete ipd Db ptite id Front Seat Adjustment Recline 121
216. hange the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires I Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ood 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid O O O C E Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil
217. he device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information Thi
218. hed before driving Underhood Safety Latch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multifunction Lever 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened High Beam Headlights Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beams Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beams Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the headlights to turn
219. hicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING Traction Control System TCS AnteVocke Brake System ABS cannot prevent the This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle n is pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing ur power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in E stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to cluding those resulting from excessive speed in a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the user s safety or the safety of others Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only
220. hood a complete stop clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine Continued es STARTING AND OPERATING 263 CAUTION Continued WARNING s Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle is at idle speed speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in into any forward gear when the engine is above REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and idle speed hit someone or something Only shift into gear when e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot the engine is idling normally and when your foot is is firmly on the brake pedal firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following st
221. houlder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retrac tor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehic
222. ically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be su
223. if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK The vehicle can be started remotely a maximum of two times consecutively The vehicle is also allowed a maxi mum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting Following either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped is sounding or if the PANIC button was pressed the system must be reset before remote starting the vehicle again To reset the system insert a valid key into the ignition and turn it to the ON position and then back to the LOCK position DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word DOOR as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word DOOR ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If any other active warnings including GATE or GAS CAP are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total Afterward the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the TRIP RESET button is pr
224. if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 6 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condition CST As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further over heating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 7 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 8 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 9 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly un
225. ill drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 28 Cruise Indicator If Equipped This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings When the trip odometer is displayed press once for Trip A and press again for Trip B If the instrument cluster is a base cluster no separate compass temperature display press the button a third time for outside ambient temperature on the odometer display Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in trip mode to reset Press this button to view the compass display if equipped Refer to Compass Trip Computer in this section ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 30 Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside
226. in a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the v
227. in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s and front passenger s if equipped for pas senger side power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s power window switch has an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automat
228. ine will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn OFF the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of cat
229. ing To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway Continued the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a Cargo Load Floor If Equipped The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side features a plastic lined tray which can hold a variety of items The maximum load capacity of the load floor is 400 Ibs 181 kg The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure 1 Push the side mounted release handles toward the center of the vehicle to release cover Floor Panel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 2 Lift the cover
230. inished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UConnect for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names ca
231. injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable safety standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors identified by a distinctive label The second row center position has a cinching latch plate identified by a distinctive label Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight However any s
232. injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION WATERINFUEL REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR BULB WIPER FAILURE gt N x i f 1 FUEL RCARWNDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH ENGINE OL REARWINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED t3 Up pI BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION C x GLOW PLUG POWER WINOSHIELDWIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUID ANDWASMER SRS b RIRHRG ee LFU MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP D e 7 ZO e 4 FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE Qt PASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF LIFTGATE RELEASE AND LIFTGATE OPEN ya TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT ow KEY ACTIVATE UPPER ANDLO
233. io Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe correspondi
234. ion Center EVIC 442 INDEX M Emergency In Case of Jacking iade on Oe ey eae Ran ote ae ee A E 356 Overheating sais sae hoa te ee wp RET RE 355 TOWING i345 44844082 Ie doe Si es des 364 Emission Control System Maintenance 370 412 Engine iere y ea TAR isis 367 Air Cleaner 4 2 2cace tok wx ak aks ES Gg 376 Block Heater 2 064 00540064 49d eeRIAqes 262 Break In Recommendations 75 Compartment 624 4424 nts e ey reddes 367 368 Compartment Identification 368 Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 0 00 0 00 409 Exhaust Gas Caution 05 76 330 Fails to Start sss sos ace Deoa 260 Flooded Starting 000000 260 Fuel Requirements 00 326 408 Jump Starting 6 6 eee 362 Oil ose acit P ree PE NER YS 373 408 409 Oil Disposal ike eg m Eee exe 375 Oil Filtet ved MV RR EE P 375 Oil Selection sss Ga he Oe epee YS 408 OilSynthetic vce ee ere ee sae cis es 375 Overheating i49 9er dot cen 355 SALINE scs ee Re ee eS 259 Temperature Gauge 0 0 eee 174 Engine Oil Viscosity 0004 374 375 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 374 375 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 61 Entry System Illuminated 19 Exhaust Gas Caution 00004 76 330 Exhaust System 380 Exterior Finish Care 0 0 0 0 00 000 cues 393 Fabric Care 2 ee 394 395 Filters Air Cleaner 22 222 ca er Re a ee Gee aes
235. ion pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 WARNING CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear i
236. ipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds mm The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in eithe
237. ire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in en STARTING AND OPERATING 299 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or
238. k Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup 3 To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard k
239. k of the seat Tether Strap Mounting WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to in creased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual
240. l Viscosity 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 4 0L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred SAE 5W 30 engine oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve cold weather starting Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer servic
241. l knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can b
242. le and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec onds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and fasten the driver seat belt 2 Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn OFF the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you h
243. le the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Samplin a Hz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc
244. le should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Infants and Child Restraints e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats WARNING e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the dE lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or chorage System in this section fatal injury to the infant e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly
245. lection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears SALES COD
246. les 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary l Inspect
247. les Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack isses Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play rus eposs rrak tiay Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting Satellite Mode Satelite Antenna lees Reception Quality Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 240 240 240 241 241 242 242 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped llle Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped ll Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV It Equipped sees Re ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped ter dicem der e term een Radio Operation CD Players eei eS E C
248. les code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enab
249. les different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with the ra a dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of
250. lls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation
251. lly if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be Rear Seat Release Strap folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still NOTE maintain some rear seating room e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Rear Seat Release Strap using a seat belt properly 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward To Lower Rear Seat 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded ition 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of ae ai each rear seatback es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To Raise Re
252. lock all doors and the liftgate The parking lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm E THINGS TO KNOW B
253. losed in a plastic The keys for your vehicle are double sided You can bag with the key code number on it If you received your insert the keys into the locks with either side up keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by an authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission e Place the shift lever in PARK e Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position e Remove the key 8163e6a8 Vehicle Key E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION a An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Ignition Switch Positions Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all 1 Lock 3 On doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 2 Acc 4 Start Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY
254. m center of the instrument panel Heated Seat Switches After turning ON the ignition Press the switch ay once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time to select Low level heat ing Press the switch a third time to shut Off the heating elements Amber indicators in the switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicators will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off When High is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal High setting If High is selected the system will automatically switch to Low after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on Low also turns Off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin seat to recline the seatback because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especia
255. m will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can
256. mage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle
257. mance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing methanol or E85 ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 eth
258. manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Se VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited
259. more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again mH STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures illie 259 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Normal Starting esses 259 OURS ering hbe qd gii eea Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or HU ae e tco mds E e E ETE 259 If Engine Fails To Start 0 260 E NEM UE a mE After Starting eec oe Ra 262 Gear Ranges H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 262 Bl Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped Bl Automatic Transmission 262 MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Brake Transmission Interlock System 263 Transfer Case sese temis wah OR ann ws eue 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Bl Anti Lock Brake System 0 0 285 Tener CASS ght Signs a asi qaid ae lll Electronic Brake Control System 288 H On Road Driving Tips 277 Astcbodc Brake System ABS 20er 0044 288 H Off Road Driving Tips 4 278 Traction Control System TCS 289 Wien po Se dL Orel Low Ran
260. n Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer may experience reduced performance an elevated rough NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the JA problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON RUN posi tion It should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes ac
261. n off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equ
262. n this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous trac
263. n and will not inflate e Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warn e ing Light and PAD Indicator Light for six S to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than an adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the c
264. n be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConn
265. n the Hazard Warning Flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Continued WARNING Continued Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 89 Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lu
266. ndicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which Limited Use Spare If Equipped apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could
267. nding upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter th
268. ng a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE For most city and highway driving 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd gear 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 4th speed OVERDRIVE The trans mission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to OVER DRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h the TOW HAUL button has not been activated e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automaticall
269. ng number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats a
270. ng time display 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported
271. nition switch to the ON RUN position gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter cause serious injury or death away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indi
272. nits are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steer ing wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con trol ORC module The ORC uses the occupant cat egory to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four weight sensors located between
273. nufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having fixed lower attachments or flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out board seating positions only The center seating position will accommodate LATCH compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing mounted attachments only Re gardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
274. oading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicl
275. of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in decreased corrosion protec
276. of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint ma
277. olders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
278. olid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pre
279. omer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TIY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract oth
280. oming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two ca
281. on 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON R
282. on the ESP On vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles When denta melading thase resulting from excessive speed ever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 204 STARTING AND OPERATING M Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indi cator Light will be illuminated All other stability fea tures of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP ON mode of
283. onditioning Refrigerant 378 Air Conditioning System iius 251 Adr Fite ull nET eu RR oo RUE RE dran 376 Air Pressure Tires 2 2 0 0 0 cee eee 306 Airbag 45e d em oed oad Y de s 48 Airbag Deployment wisan eamin i ara 60 Airbag Light ccce 0 iiie 63 77 181 Airbag Maintenance 0 0000 61 Alarm Light 4 9 RR 176 Alarm Pane us ve dave es we ERE Eae 23 Alarm Security Alarm Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio less 241 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 408 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 285 288 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 180 Anti Theft System saa dese dain a RR p xe 17 Appearance Care seda dedecora 392 Assistance TOWING s o Rn RR tais 101 Auto Down Power Windows 33 Automatic Dimming Mirror 84 Automatic Transaxle 2 0 0 0 00 00000 ee 262 Automatic Transmission 265 270 389 Fluid and Filter Changes 389 Fluid Level Check 005 389 El id Type isset khen 390 410 Gear Ranges 2 6 cavinnsas Gee Perd X Es 265 Special Additives soser ssi 0 0 00 eee 390 Torque Converter 0 000000 ee 270 274 en INDEX 439 AUtOSHICK ovata ay rp ede eee Pe EAM v 272 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 154 Auxiliary Power Outlet 154 Axle Fluid 2p 22i y ees 4
284. onditions 1 Weak batteries in RKE transmitter The expected life of the batteries is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system This system allows the vehicle to be started from distances up to 300 ft 91 m using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter which is part of your ignition key In order to start your vehicle remotely the hood liftgate and all of the doors must be closed To start your vehicle remotely press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 8193fe7a Remote Start Button 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Once the engine starts it will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press and release the REMOTE START button once To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Once the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key in the ignition and turn it to the ON position Otherwise the system will cancel the remote start and automatically turn off Remote start will also cancel
285. only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system e Press the PHONE button to begin 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or
286. onnect Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Inc
287. ont passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the customer center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel The side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of
288. oolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water antifreeze cool ant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove
289. operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 5 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving
290. operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode Panel Air is directed through the four outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is dir
291. or above the antenna 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will
292. or increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JUMP STARTING WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and
293. or vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 2 your body These are the strongest parts of your Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch body and can take the forces of a collision the best plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make go around your lap your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe also Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one
294. ounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 296 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 read wear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation t
295. peatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this secti
296. player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from
297. press and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve Call toll free at hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find aud correct problems the first time using step by 1900 990 4438 0 9 step troubleshooting and drivability procedures e 1 800 387 1143 Canada proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools Or and equipment i Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the B a cont
298. press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a
299. quent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 322 STARTING AND OPERATING e Three Trigger modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressu
300. r Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 H pS Rl 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or N Schedule 96 Months Maintenance r 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule N 2 Rotate tires 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil A J Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter N 1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T Rotate tires H 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Q If using your vehicle for any of the E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes following Dusty or off road conditions I Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the engine air cleaner filter S J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet replace if necessary C off road or frequent trailer towing md Inspect the brake linings replace if E necessary D Inspect the CV joints U Inspect exhaust system L JJ Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends E and boot seals replace if necessary S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 102
301. r AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be s
302. r each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of t
303. r inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with
304. r vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops e On the highways slow down n city traffic while stopped put transmission in back into the normal range If the pointer remains on NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down engine off immediately and call for service an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located WARNING in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for
305. rack number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playi
306. raw Yellow Yellow abin Compartment Node IOD CCN Me pud d i d Seat If Wireless Control Mod q PP ule WCM SIREN M10 20Amp Ignition Off Draw Clock Module CLK Yellow ehicle Entertainment MOD Multifunction Du Pup Sat Control Switch MUL ellite Digital Audio Re TIFCTN SW ceiver SDARS DVD Hands Free Module M14 M need Tow Export HEM RADIO An ellow nly tenna ANT Universal Garage Door Opener UGDO Vanity Lamp VANITY LP M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Red IOD HVAC ATC MW SENSR Underhood Lamp UH LMP M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP Green 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Park Yellow Heater Ventilation Air Blue Lamp LI TAIL LIC Conditioning PRK LMP Automatic Tempera M18 15 Am p Right Tail Park Run m cum Blue Lamp RT TAIL PRK ATC Rearview Mirror RUN LMP s VW MIR Cabin mpartment Node M19 25 Am Auto Shut Down ASD con Transfer Case Natura 1 and 2 Switch I CASE SW M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment RUN ST Multifunc Blue Node Interior Light tion Control Switch CCN INT LIGHT MULTIFTCN SW Switch Bank SW Tire Pressure Monitor BANK Steering Con TPM Glow Plug trol M duis SCM Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD Only Yellow 3
307. re e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with dlear water scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film Special Care stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive to scratch the paint near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing a month that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish of the doors rocker panels and liftgate are kept clear and open 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considere
308. re limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If a disc contains multi formats such
309. re monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will T4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on s
310. re to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset At some point in time it may be necessary to reactivate the auto up feature To do so perform the following procedure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door below the power window switches allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT button To enable the window controls press the window LOCKOUT button a second time Window Lockout Switch 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the wor
311. rfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminants increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or
312. right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll contro
313. rned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position and the key is not in the ignition Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation Move the lever upward to the second detent for Low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for High speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the delay position
314. rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type dd o lh No program type or un dii None Adult Hits Adilt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Program Type di ud Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Program Type 16 m Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed
315. rs 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the TPMS Telltale light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subse
316. rson sitting a few feet meters away from UConnect system For best results the Voice Training you session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Perf i imi i This procedure may be repeated with a new user The POHOGDABOGIS SUANIIACU une system will adapt to the last trained voice only e low to medium blower setting To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default e low to medium vehicle speed settings enter the Voice Training session via the above low road noise procedure and follow the prompts e smooth road surface 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e fully closed windows e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be Pi spoken eight zero zero e dry weather condition P 5 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e When navigating through an automated system such compromised with the convertible top down as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string m
317. rts must be stopped taat m Stew VL cU UR ahi replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the than a short period adjust the ventilation system to system force fresh outside air into the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the bulb is not lit during starting have it replaced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selecting the DEFROST mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and hig
318. ry to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of nine inches The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 50 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 50 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift
319. s 90 000 km or 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule M A l N T 4 Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Mj Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate tires N filter LJ Replace the engine air cleaner filter ME Rotate tires Q Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine I Inspect the front and rear axle fluid J Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine change if using your vehicle for police I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary S taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer Q1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes T towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing E 1 Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi T fleet off road or frequent trailer towing L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
320. s and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 326 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 0 0000 KR5S120123 Canada ea c bn ote ae eae a 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L Engine The 3 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premi
321. s device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034205978 Power Sunroof Switch en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Opening Sunroof Express WARNING inr Press the switch rearward and release it within one half e Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with second and the sunroof will open automatically from any the key in the ignition switch Occupants particu position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati larly unattended children can become entrapped cally This is called Express Open During Express Open by the power sunroof while operating the power operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in the sunroof serious injury
322. s not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 23 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 24 Shift Lever Indicator The electronic shift lever display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions The display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your
323. se serious injury or death Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If Engine Fails to Start WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle
324. sfer case 4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shift ing instructions The 4WD LOCK position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The 4WD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain
325. should have its own brakes and they motoring safety should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances The trailer tow package may include a 4 pin and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector WARNING NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident STARTING AND OPERATING 349 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations K 6 OX Lo Oo oo 25 oO O 0O 057003765 7 Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 4 Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Female Pins 4 Park d TRUE Drakes 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the
326. ss Trailer Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Wt 3 7L Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler 3 7L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler 4 0L Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 4 0L Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 4 0L Automatic 4x2 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler 4 0L Automatic 4x4 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg w Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as should never exceed the weight referenced on the tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and and loading information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Tongue Wt See Note Transmission Wt 3
327. ssure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 NOTE Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 second
328. stem Caution 000000 330 FUSES quta So eg OU cA RU Dee 396 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 144 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 331 333 370 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 004 174 Gasoline Fuel 44 INDEX ae Gasoline Reformulated l l 327 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 328 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0 174 Puel o coss eaten eru es 174 Odoineter cube es e race rege vr dre 184 Speedometer 4 scat ee xa p due dors 176 Tachometer 22e e rep 181 Gear Ranges oi ace ee RR OA Ws 265 271 General Information 0 17 115 326 Glass Cleanings son unseen dae bag eR He 395 Gross Axle Weight Rating 334 337 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 334 336 GVWR egi beats sudare ba es So E a Ron sais 334 Hands Free Phone UConnect 86 Hazard Warning Flasher 354 Head Restraints 00 0004 123 Head Rests es ec age ks E Gees 123 Headlights Bulb Replacement 0 4 403 Dimmer Switch ees 130 Replacing 23 4 eres da eher Re era 403 WICH x ce pedea wan aie eso eae eR RR Ad 130 Heated Seats 24 cse roces xen bee E oed 124 Heater Engine Block sisse m 262 Hitches Trailer TOWING 6 esa SAS xac dc RR a 341 Holder Com reter eseat e4 dee ea ORT 159 Holder C p asa Ex peer Ear S ab Rd 158 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 144 Hoo
329. stration and the title 8 INTRODUCTION ME VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Word About Your Keys 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 a Sentry Key uases cogo tha Ead ee a 14 Replacement Keys 000005 15 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information s r ecrire ba 17 li Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 To Arm The System 000000 18 To Disarm The System 0 18 B Muminated Entry oaan cR 19 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 004 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 20 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 21 Express Down Window Feature If Equipped ocras si beeen eee 22 Using The Panic Alarm 0 23 Programming Additional Transmitters 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Battery Replacement 00 29 dMiliitgale cer eel a eae aes 36 General Information
330. sult from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indica tor Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the MIL to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this
331. sure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently WARNING Continued sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic e Battery posts terminals and related accessories maintenance required contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling the battery WARNING e Battery acid is a corrosive acid solution and can CAUTION burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid It is essential when replacing the cables on the to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean battery that the positive cable is attached to the over a battery when attaching clamps If acid positive post and the negative cable is attached to the splashes in your face or on your skin flush the negative post Battery posts are marked positive area immediately with large amounts of water and negative and identified on the battery case Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep Also if a fast charger is used while the battery is in flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables a booster battery or any other booster source with before connecting the charger to the battery Do not an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable use a fast charger to provide starting voltage clamps to
332. t the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle freezing point before attempting a jump start 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brack ets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed NOTE The transmission must be in NEUTRAL under any towing configuration 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles Front Wheels Raised The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL the ignition key in the LOCK position the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed Rear Wheels Raised The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km This vehicle may be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL the ignition key in the LOCK position the rear wheels raised
333. t passenger and side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a mot
334. t should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditionin
335. t three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflat
336. ted that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only 2nd gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in OVERDRIVE and in DRIVE NOTE e The torque converter clutch
337. tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge and the tachometer Compass Trip Computer Display The compass trip computer when the appropriate con ditions exist will show the following messages in the odometer display e Door Ajar door e Lift Gate Ajar gATE e Loose Fuel Cap gASCAP 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right button on the instrument cluster Control Buttons Press and release the odometer trip odometer reset but ton right side of the instrument cluster to access the compass trip computer displays Display Button Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicl
338. ter console front seat passengers Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 STORAGE Console Storage Compartment Front Storage Compartment To open press the latch and lift the cover The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items Center Console Front Storage Compartment 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The center console has a removable storage tray which CARGO AREA FEATURES can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction lever to the extreme top position Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving WARNING Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Removable Storage Tray es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handl
339. th the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time
340. than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions can cause the catalytic converter to over heat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exh
341. the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say Help or Main Menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM I
342. the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the
343. the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system Manually unlocking the doors with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or the driver s door key lock cylinder will not disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 23 ft 7 m using your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 818e937a Three Button RKE transmitter NOTE e For the remote starting feature if equipped refer to Remote Starting System in this section e Your vehicle s RKE transmitter may have three or four buttons depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to un
344. the brake linings replace if necessary 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 14 Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine off road or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the CV joints equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Lc O O O C E 0 O O M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S
345. the ignition is turned to the ON position and the system is enabled the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs for approximately one second Then the system dimly illuminates the two inner most LEDs when it is detecting no obstacles The Rear Park Assist System is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the system is enabled and the driver shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED 79 in 200 cm Yellow Sounds for second 1st LED 51 in 130 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Intermittent 7th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Continuous 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your
346. the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level i
347. the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depe
348. the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Control Module Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Front Remote Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Retractors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Occupant Classification System OCS Front Pas senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC module de termines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification module The ORC will detect roll over but not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not o
349. tically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen gers doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your se
350. til the vehicle is disarmed 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition ESP BAS switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 11 TOW HAUL Indicator If Equipped The TOW HAUL button is located on the gear shift bezel This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected TOW 12 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 13 Transmission Temperature Indicator If
351. tion and engine damage If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine c
352. tion in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short
353. tions For Jacking 358 H If Your Engine Overheats 355 Jacking Instructions eve acera ey en H Jacking And Tire Changing 356 Mijumpetaring kesereresiesot esvani est Jack Location 16 0 r aa 356 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Spare Tire Stowage rt patus 356 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles Spare Tire Removal 00 357 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Hazard Warning Switch To operate the Hazard Warning flasher press the switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Press the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS CAUTION In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the Driving with a hot cooling system could damage appropriate action you
354. tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe BE Segu and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or Tires General Information section of this manual on vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures This could cause inadequate braking and possible Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation porem pressures before trailer usage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for loaded it
355. tive The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 17 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 18 SERV Service 4WD Indicator If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required SERV 4wD 19 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System
356. tive battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems bol td c 1 j e z b e b d pe e N 81 326 0913 a im el E p 5 be nan s Eo E Bu er A p a Pel P re i sd a a at Printed in U S A
357. to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will still be on In this situa tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Unde
358. to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L or 4LO Use first gear and 4L or 4LO for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headwa
359. to remove the key en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The automatic door locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The automatic door locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the automatic door locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors
360. to your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Dial by Saying a Number e The system will prompt you to say the name of the e Press the PHONE button to begin person cu aant tall After the Ready prompt and the following beep say vec ie Ready qeeimptuano tie colon ie Beep sa the name of the person you want to call For example Duis you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ e The system
361. trol lllllelessss 292 High Beam Indicator 000 176 Turn Signal 00040 131 404 405 406 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 ee eee 19 Voltage wine ede ein e tae CHER ERE Seded tas 180 Instrument Cluster 00 05 130 174 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 174 InteriOt aint ae Eus eR QURE 132 Load Floor Cargo llle 162 Lights On Reminder 000 130 en INDEX 447 Load N Go Manual Service 0 es 433 Sliding Cargo Floor 00005 163 Manual Transmission Loading Vehicle sans s 0 0 6 llle 334 Lubricant Selection 0004 410 THeS oia 843440505 oe buon eR E Re eG oe 301 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 388 MOCKS soa i sh ghar a SURE cram SURE ace A eae 26 Mini Trip Computer sss 187 194 Child Protection eedem Re ema Ol JMIPIOIS v9 9 beh ER evite es 83 jor 26 Automatic Dimming llle 84 Power Door a6 etes b Ret RET 28 Electric Powered 0 0 0 0 000 ccc eee 85 Low Tire Pressure System llle 316 Outside suot atelier detent etre eis tt ana 84 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Rearview adu e Bete ew eit a ze 83 CALCH i cece dig stes mu taeda RES T anre rer 69 71 Pcia d PEE 86 Lubrication Body 1 1 2 eee eee 379 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Luggage Carrier 5 2 ia a aa sale eS ERR ES 166 Monitor Tire Pressure System 316 Mopar Parts
362. tton 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the gine instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only 2nd gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 4 0L Engine The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop with
363. turn the igni tion OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above the 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting ou
364. um gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 4 0L Engine The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions perfor
365. ur vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake pag
366. ur vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE CHAINS Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued CAUTION Continued Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h
367. usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available cellular service If you need towing assistance and area e Press the PHONE button to begin If supported this number may be programmable on i j some systems To do this press the PHONE button ia me Re pM and the dollowing besp sap ome i owing Assistance and say Setup followed by Emergency NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 WARNING 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico e The UConnect system does slightly
368. vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage sistance when programming Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan 1 Turn the ig
369. vement can be more apparent on ice vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering and snow This is normal efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal Continued es STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Continued WARNING e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning To use your brakes and accelerator more safely follow these tips e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake
370. vent Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designate
371. ving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than e The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 The ESP system has two available operating modes in WARNING 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD The Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot pre vehicles vent the natural laws of physics from acting
372. will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The automatic unlock doors on exit feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The automatic unlock doors on exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the automatic unlock doors on exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate it to either the LOCK or UNLOCK positions
373. y by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L or 4LO range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended opera
374. y select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until the transmission cools down After the transmission cools down the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to 3rd gear en STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in 2nd gear in any forward driving range To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle mm 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position Tow Haul Bu
375. y three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following trip functions displays in the EVIC e Average fuel economy e Distance to empty e Elapsed time e Display units of measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the trip computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less th
376. yless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes while the headlights and taillights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and Security modes to hear the differen

Craftsman 247.28933 Lawn Mower User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents